Table of Contents
1
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2005 Ford Motor Company
3
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
4
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 500 miles (800 km) before towing a trailer.
Additionally, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do
not drive over 70 mph (112 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This style of driving will help the engine and other parts of your vehicle
break in at the heavier loads. For more detailed information about towing a
trailer, refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during the
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation, since these additives
may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage,
Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L Power Stroke
Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions
Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description
of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide
that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
5
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
6
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Driving chapter.
F150 SuperCrew Owners: Snowplowing
Your vehicle is not recommended for snowplowing. Ford makes no
representation as to the suitability of your vehicle for snowplowing, in
particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle weight limits,
airbag (SRS) deployment sensitivity, vehicle crash integrity, or
powertrain durability. The Snowplow Package Option is not available.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.
7
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Air Bag-Front
Child Seat
Fasten Safety Belt
Air Bag-Side
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Anti-Lock Brake System
Powertrain Malfunction
Master Lighting Switch
Fog Lamps-Front
Speed Control
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fuse Compartment
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Defrost/Demist
8
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout
Interior Luggage
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Fan Warning
Explosive Gas
MAX
MIN
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Power Steering Fluid
Emission System
Engine Air Filter
Jack
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
Check Fuel Cap
9
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Base instrument cluster
Base with Tachometer instrument cluster
Mid instrument cluster
10
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Luxury instrument cluster
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Electronic throttle control (if
equipped): Illuminates when the
engine has defaulted to a
’limp-home’ operation. Report the
fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity.
11
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
On vehicles equipped with a message center, “ENGINE FAILSAFE
MODE” will be displayed, refer to Message Center in the Driver
Controls chapter.
Brake system warning light: To confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will momentarily illuminate when the ignition is
turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or in a
position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake when
the ignition is turned to the ON position.
Base with and without
Tachometer instrument cluster
!
BRAKE
Mid and Luxury instrument
!
P
cluster
If the brake system warning light
does not illuminate at this time,
seek service immediately from your
BRAKE
authorized dealer. Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates
low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized
dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental
restraint system has been detected.
12
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
Overdrive off (if equipped):
Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned off, refer to the
O/D
OFF
Driving chapter. If the light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have
the transmission serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Four wheel drive low: Illuminates
4x4
LOW
when four-wheel drive low is
engaged.
Four wheel drive high: Illuminates
when four-wheel drive high is
engaged.
4x4 HI
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
13
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
MINI MESSAGE CENTER WARNING DISPLAYS (IF EQUIPPED)
Door ajar: Displays when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
Low fuel: Displays when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Check fuel cap: Displays when the
fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Continued driving with
this display on may cause the
Service engine soon warning light to
come on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Check gauge: Displays when any of
the following conditions has
occurred:
• The engine coolant temperature
is high.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The fuel gauge is at or near empty.
Trans Fault: Displays when a
transmission problem has been
detected and shifting may be
restricted. If the light remains on,
have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
14
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the
engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles (kilometers) of the vehicle.
• With Mini Message Center
15
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
• With Full Message Center
Refer to Message Center in the
Drivers Controls chapter on how to
switch the display from Metric to
English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
• With Mini Message Center
Press and release the button on top
of the cluster to toggle between
odometer and trip odometer display.
• With Full Message Center
Press and release the message
center INFO button until TRIP
mode appears in the display. Press
the RESET button to reset.
Tachometer (if equipped):
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute. Driving with
your tachometer pointer
continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine.
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates
the battery voltage when the
ignition is in the ON position. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range, have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
by your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
16
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle
checked at your authorized dealer.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow next to the fuel pump
icon indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
For more information, refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
17
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
FORD AM/FM STEREO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1.
/
Tune: Press to manually
go up or down the radio frequency.
Also use in menu mode to select
various settings.
2. Audio: Press to access select
various settings.
Treble: Press to adjust the treble setting. Use
/
/
SEEK,
SEEK
Bass: Press to adjust the bass setting. Use
SEEK
Balance: Press to adjust the audio between the left and right speakers.
Use SEEK, SEEK
Fade: Press to adjust the audio between the front and rear speakers.
.
/
/
SEEK,
.
/
/
.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
.
18
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Setting the clock: Press until HR or Mn is displayed.
Press SEEK to adjust the hours/minutes.
/
/
3. Seek: Press to access the
next/previous strong station.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
5. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
“nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
7. CLK (Clock): Press CLK to
toggle between displaying the radio
frequency and the clock setting.
19
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
FORD SINGLE CD SOUND SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1.
/
Tune: Press to manually
go up or down the radio frequency.
Also use in menu mode to select
various settings.
2. Phone/mute: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
3. Menu: Press to toggle through
the following modes:
Treble: Press to adjust the treble setting. Use
/
/
SEEK,
SEEK
Bass: Press to adjust the bass setting. Use
SEEK
Balance: Press to adjust the audio between the left and right speakers.
.
/
/
SEEK,
.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
.
20
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Fade: Press to adjust the audio between the front and rear speakers.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume automatically changes slightly
with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 .
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Setting the clock: Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is
displayed. Use
hours/minutes.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the
4. Aux: Press to toggle between
FES/DVD and AUX modes. If no
auxiliary sources are available, NO
AUX AUDIO will be displayed.
5. Seek: Press to access the next
strong station or track.
6. Text: This control currently not
supported.
7. Shuffle: Press to play tracks in
random order on the selected CD.
8. Comp (Compression): In CD
mode, brings soft and loud CD
passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
9. Repeat: Press to repeat the
current CD track.
21
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
10. Fast forward: Press to
manually advance in a CD track.
11. Rewind: Press to manually
reverse in a CD track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
13. Scan: Press for a brief sampling
of radio stations or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
14. Seek: Press to access the next
strong station or track.
15. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
16. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
“nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
17. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
18. CD eject: Press to eject a CD.
19. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up.
22
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
FORD DUAL MEDIA SOUND SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1.
/
Tune: Press to manually
go up or down the radio frequency.
Also use in menu mode to select
various settings.
2. Seek: Press to access the next
strong station or track.
3. Phone/mute: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
4. Menu: Press to toggle through
the following modes:
Treble: Press to adjust the treble setting. Use
SEEK
Bass: Press to adjust the bass setting. Use
SEEK
/
/
SEEK,
.
/
/
SEEK,
.
23
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Balance: Press to adjust the audio between the left and right speakers.
Use
Fade: Press to adjust the audio between the front and rear speakers.
Use SEEK, SEEK
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
.
/
/
.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume automatically changes slightly
with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust.
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 .
Use
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Setting the clock: Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is
displayed. Use
hours/minutes.
/
/
SEEK, SEEK
to adjust the
5. Aux: Press to toggle between
FES/DVD and AUX modes. If no
auxiliary sources are available, NO
AUX AUDIO will be displayed.
6. Tape eject: Press to eject a tape.
7. Text: This control currently not
supported.
8. Shuffle: Press to play CD tracks
in random order on the selected CD.
9. Compress (Compression): In
CD mode, brings soft and loud CD
passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
24
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
10. Repeat: Press to repeat the
current CD track.
11. Fast forward: Press to
manually advance in a tape or CD
track.
12. Rewind: Press to manually
reverse in a tape or CD track.
13. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
14. Cassette door: Insert a tape, facing to the right.
15. Tape direction: Press to
change which side of the tape is
playing.
16. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
17. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
“nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
18. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
19. CD eject: Press to eject a CD.
20. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up.
25
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
21. Seek: Press to access the
previous strong station or track.
22. Scan: Press for a brief sampling
of radio stations or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
PREMIUM/AUDIOPHILE IN-DASH SIX CD/MP3 SOUND SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1.
/
Tune/Disc selector:
Press to manually go up or down
the radio frequency or to select a
desired disc. Also use in menu mode
to select various settings.
2. Phone/mute: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media.
26
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
3. Menu: Press to toggle through
the following modes:
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 .
Use
/
/
, SEEK
to turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Bass: Press MENU repeatedly to access. Press
/
/
SEEK
to
adjust the bass levels.
Treble: Press MENU repeatedly to access. Press
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the treble levels.
Balance: Press MENU repeatedly to access. Press
/
/
,
SEEK
Fade: Press MENU repeatedly to access. Press
to adjust the audio between the front and rear speakers.
Occupancy mode: (Available on Audiophile radios only): Press MENU
repeatedly to access. Press SEEK to optimize sound for
ALL SEATS, DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS.
to adjust the audio between the left and right speakers.
/
/
, SEEK
/
/
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume automatically changes slightly
with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use
/
/
SEEK
to adjust. Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0
turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting.
Setting the clock: Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is
displayed. Press
Track/Folder Mode: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode. In Track
Mode, pressing SEEK will scroll through all tracks on the disc.
SEEK will scroll only through tracks
/
/
SEEK
to adjust the hours/minutes.
In Folder mode, pressing
within the selected folder.
27
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Compression: Available only in CD mode, compression brings soft and
loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
Repeat: Available only in CD mode. Press to repeat the current CD track.
RDS (Available on Audiophile radios only): RDS is available in FM mode,
and allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of
music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz/RB, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top
40. RDS must be activated to access Find and Show functions.
To activate, press and hold MENU until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in the
display. Use
/
.
SEEK
to toggle RDS ON/OFF. Then press
MENU repeatedly to scroll through Find, Show and RDS. When RDS is
Off, you will not be able to access Find and Show functions.
Find: RDS must be activated to access the Find function. Find allows
you to search RDS-equipped stations for the desired music category.
Use
/
to find the desired program type, then use
SEEK
or
SCAN to begin the search.
Show: RDS must be activated to access the Show function. Show allows
you to display the name of the radio station or program type.
Use
/
/
SEEK
to show type, name or none.
4. Aux: Press to toggle between
FES/DVD and AUX modes. If no
auxiliary sources are available, NO
AUX AUDIO will be displayed.
5. Seek: Press to access the next
strong station or track.
6. Text: In CD mode, this feature
reads and displays track song title,
artist name and album title.
7. Shuffle: Press to play the tracks
in random order.
8. FOLDER: Press to access next
folder on MP3 discs, if folders are
available.
28
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
9. FOLDER: press to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
folders are available.
10. Fast forward: Press to
manually advance in a CD track.
11. Rewind: Press to manually
reverse in a CD track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
13. Scan: Press for a brief sampling
of radio stations or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
14. Seek: Press to access the
previous strong station or track.
15. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM
frequency band.
16. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
“nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
17. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already loaded into the
system, CD play will begin where it
ended last.
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD.
Press LOAD and a memory preset
to load to a specific slot. Press and
hold to autoload up to six CDs.
29
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
19. CD eject: Press to eject a CD.
Press and hold to auto eject all CDs
present in the system. If there is no
CD present, the display will read NO CD.
20. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up.
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES). Refer to the DVD Supplement Guide for further information on
your system.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
30
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
31
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the back seats.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive in the O
(OFF) position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the airflow selector in
O (OFF). This allows the vehicle to breathe using the outside air
inlets.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
32
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
2. Air flow selections: Controls
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief
description on each control.
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated
air through the instrument panel
vents and center console vents (if
equipped) to cool the vehicle. This
re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient.
Recirculated air may also help
reduce undesirable odors from
entering the vehicle.
: Distributes air through the
instrument panel vents and center
console vents (if equipped).
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, center console
vents (if equipped) and the floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
33
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor
vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
R
3.
Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to defrost the rear
window. Refer to Rear window defroster (if equipped) later in this
chapter for more information.
Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate. This
function will clear snow, fog and thin ice from the side rear view mirrors.
4. Recirculation control
: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation engages
automatically with selection of MAX A/C or can be engaged manually in
any other airflow selection except defrost. Recirculation may turn off
automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A/C.
5. A/C (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use
with recirculated air to improve cooling performance. Engages
automatically in MAX A/C, Defrost and Floor/Defrost.
6. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
(defrost) or
(floor/defrost)
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
airflow selector in the O (OFF) or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
34
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
• For maximum cooling performance (Max A/C):
Max A/C mode:
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
Panel (
) and panel/floor (
) modes:
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Select A/C and recirculated air (
). Use recirculated air with
A/C to provide colder airflow.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
35
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius: If
your vehicle is equipped with a full message center, refer to Setup menu
in the Message center section of the Driver Controls chapter for more
information. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini message center, see
your authorized dealer for temperature conversion.
MAX A/C: For maximum cooling performance, press
, A/C,
,
and set the temperature to 60°F and the highest blower setting.
36
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
1.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and
thin ice.
2.
Fan speed control: Press to manually increase or decrease the
fan speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
R
3. A.
Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to
Rear window defroster (if equipped) in this section for more
information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and
heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
3. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate. This
feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
4.
Recirculation control: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
engaged manually in any other airflow selection except
Recirculation may turn off automatically.
(defrost).
5. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
6. : Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
7.
: Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts.
8.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts.
9.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console
registers (if equipped).
10. Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
12. Temperature control: Controls the temperature in the cabin of the
vehicle. Press to increase/decrease the temperature.
13. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
37
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system with heated seats
(if equipped)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
If your vehicle is equipped with a full message center, refer to Units
(Fahrenheit/Celsius) in the Driver Controls chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with a mini message center, refer to Mini
message center electronic compass temperature display in the Driver
Controls Chapter.
38
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
MAX A/C: For maximum cooling performance, press
and set the temperature to 60°F and the highest blower setting.
1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
, A/C,
,
vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and
thin ice.
2.
Fan speed control: Press to manually increase or decrease the
fan speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO.
R
3. A.
Rear defroster: Press to defrost the rear window. Refer to
Rear window defroster (if equipped) in this section for more
information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and
heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
3. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate. This
feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
4.
Passenger heated seat control: Press to heat the passenger
seat. Press once to activate high heat (two indicator lights). Press again
to activate low heat (one indicator light). Press again to deactivate the
passenger heated seat.
5.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
6.
7.
: Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts, demister
outlets, and the front and rear seat floor ducts.
8.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console
registers (if equipped).
9.
Driver heated seat control: Press to heat the driver seat. Press
once to activate high heat (two indicator lights). Press again to activate
low heat (one indicator light). Press again to deactivate the driver
heated seat.
10. Manual override controls: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
11.
Recirculation control: Press to activate/deactivate air
recirculation in cabin. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculation can be
engaged manually in any other airflow selection except
Recirculation may turn off automatically.
(defrost).
39
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
12. A/C control: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in AUTO,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
13. OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
14. Temperature control: Press to increase/decrease the temperature
in the vehicle cabin.
15. AUTO: To engage automatic temperature control, press AUTO and
select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on
or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach
the desired temperature.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
airflow selector in the OFF or with (recirculated air) engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
• For maximum cooling performance (Max A/C):
In AUTO : Press AUTO control and set to desired temperature.
In Manual Override Control: Press the
(panel), A/C, and
(recirculation) controls, set the temperature to 60°F and the fan to the
highest blower setting.
• To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
40
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
R
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to defrost your rear window from fog and thin ice. If equipped, it
also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and thin ice from the
side mirrors.
Ensure that the ignition is ON position. Press to turn the defroster
ON/OFF. The indicator light will illuminate when activated.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
41
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control
clockwise to the first position
turn on the parking lamps. Rotate
clockwise to the second
to
position
to also turn on the
headlamps.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds or on vehicles equipped with
a message center, you can select a
delay from 0–180 seconds, after the
ignition switch is turned to OFF.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise to
.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to
.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a message center, then the auto
lamps can be programmed manually by:
1. Start with the ignition in OFF and the autolamps
selected.
2. Turn off the autolamps by turning the headlamp switch to
3. Turn the ignition to ON.
.
4. Turn the ignition to OFF.
5. Select the autolamps by turning the headlamp switch to
.
Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a 10 second period. At
this point, the headlamps and park lamps will turn on.
6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time
(maximum of 3 minutes).
At this point, the headlamps and park lamps will turn off.
42
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
control is in the
,
or
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light
will illuminate if
the ignition is in the ON position.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
In order for the DRLs to function:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control is in the OFF, parking lamp or autolamp
position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
43
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Move the control to the full down
position, past detent, to prevent the
interior lights from illuminating
when the doors are opened.
VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works
well).
44
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a 4 mm
socket/wrench to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to adjust
down) or clockwise (to adjust up)
aligning the upper edge of the light
pattern up to the horizontal line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
45
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
INTERIOR LAMPS
Map lamps
To turn on the map lamps, press the
control next to each lamp.
Rear dome lamp (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when the
control is in the DOOR (left)
position, any door is open, the
instrument panel switch is pushed
past the detent and when any of the
remote entry controls are pressed
while the ignition is off.
The rear dome lamp can be turned
ON (center) or OFF (right) by sliding the control.
Rear map lamp (if equipped)
The rear map lamp lights are
located on the end of the overhead
rail system. The lamps can be
turned on or off by pushing on the
lens.
46
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Dome/courtesy lamps (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
The reading portion, the two outer lights, can only be toggled on and off
at the lamp.
Courtesy/reading/cargo lamps (if equipped)
The dome portion of the lamp, the
center light, can be turned on when
the headlamp control is rotated fully
up or when any door is opened.
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
47
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Number of
Trade number
bulbs
Headlamps
2
2
2
2
2
2
9008
3157A (amber)
194
9145
3156
4057K or 3057K
Front park/turn lamps
Front sidemarker
Foglamps
Backup lamp
Rear stop/turn/sidemarker/tail
lamp
High-mount brakelamp
Cargo lamp
License plate lamp
Exterior mounted mirror turn
signal indicator (if equipped)
1
2
2
1
921
921
194
See your dealer
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
48
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
2. At the top and inboard side of the
headlamp, peel the protective cover
back from the lower screws and
loosen the three retaining screws.
3. Once the three retaining screws
have been removed, disengage the
tab at the top center of the
headlamp assembly by lifting it up.
4. Slide headlamp assembly forward
disconnecting the snap attachment
at the fender and disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by
pulling rearward.
5. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it
straight out.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
49
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the OFF position and open the
hood.
2. At the top and inboard side of the
headlamp, peel the protective cover
back from the lower screws and
loosen the three retaining screws.
3. Once the three retaining screws
have been removed, disengage the
tab at the top center of the
headlamp assembly by lifting it up.
4. Slide the headlamp assembly
forward disconnecting the snap
attachment at the fender.
5. Remove bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and then pull the
bulb straight out.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing tail/brake/turn signal/backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the OFF position.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assembly screws and remove
the two screws from the tail lamp
assembly.
50
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
3. Carefully pull the lamp assembly
straight rearward from the tailgate
pillar to disengage two hidden
snap-in retainers. (Flare side tail
lamps are not equipped with snap-in
retainers.)
4. Remove bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket
and press in the new bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing high-mount brake and cargo lamp bulbs
Make sure the headlamp control is
in the OFF position.
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
vehicle to expose the bulb sockets.
2. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating counterclockwise and
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order.
Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the OFF position.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
foglamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the foglamp bulb.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
51
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator lamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
52
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
53
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column. While the lever is
in the down position, tilt the
steering column to its desired
orientation.
While holding the steering column,
pull the lever up to its original
position to lock the steering column.
Never adjust the steering
column when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package. The overhead console can come on rails, during
which it can be removed by the customer, or it can come as a non-rail
component of the headliner, which cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a overhead console rail system, there are
several features that can be operated.
54
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
1. To open the bins, move the
center latch forward which will
allow the door to be opened.
2. The latches on the side of the
bins are to enable the user to
remove the bin or add a dealer
purchased feature.
Sliding the bins on the rails may
cause damage to the headliner.
The removable bins are to be
snapped into place not slid.
Storage compartment
Press the release on the door to
open the storage compartment.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object. The front bin may be
used to store small objects.
Overhead Storage Bins
• When on the overhead rail, adjacent bins must be pinned together.
Bins adjacent to the End Cap must be pinned to the End Cap. Bins
without pin attachments should not be placed on the overhead rail.
• Failure to pin the bins together can allow the bins to become
separated from the rail under certain conditions.
55
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Bin Removal
Attach and remove bins from the rail using the following instructions:
Place both palms on the underside of the storage bin, avoiding the
storage bin door.
Push upwards with palms.
56
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
While pushing upwards with palms, grip the side latches with fingers and
squeeze.
With pressure applied with palms and side latches squeezed down, pull
downward on the entire storage bin and remove.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT
Power outlets are designed
for accessory plugs only. Do
not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet
can cause damage not covered by
your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel.
57
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use
the power point.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element.
The maximum power each power point can supply depends on the fuse
rating. For example: a 20A fuse should supply a maximum of 240 Watts,
a 15A fuse should supply a maximum of 180 Watts and a 10A fuse should
supply a maximum of 120 Watts. Exceeding these limits will result in a
blown fuse.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
An additional auxiliary power point
is located on the lower rear side of
the center console. The power point
is accessible from the rear seats.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The center console offers several useful storage features. These include:
1. Cupholders
1
2
2. Tissue holder in lid
3. Power point
4. Large utility compartment has
Coin holder slots, PalmPilot/PDA
holder, and Pen holder
3
4
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
58
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
59
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
the bottom part of the rocker switch
and release quickly. Press the top
part of the rocker switch to stop.
Window lock (if equipped)
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control.
Note: The rear window switches will not illuminate when the window
control is in the LOCKED position.
Press the right side to restore the window controls.
Power Sliding Back Window (if equipped)
To operate the power sliding back window, the ignition switch must be in
the Run or Accessory position.
• Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open window
all the way to the full open
position.
• Press and hold the top part of the
rocker switch to close the
window.
All rear seat occupants and/or cargo must be properly restrained
and clear of the back window opening before operating the
power sliding back window.
60
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Accessory delay (if equipped)
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until
any door is opened.
MIRRORS
Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high
reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically
adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror
since this may impair proper mirror performance.
Power side view mirrors
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
lock mirrors in place.
61
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
Heated mirrors remove ice, mist and
fog. To activate the heated mirrors,
R
press the rear defrost button
located on the climate control panel.
Refer to Rear Window Defrost in
the Climate Controls chapter for
more information.
On vehicles not equipped with rear
defrost, press the heated mirror
control located on the climate
control panel, refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for more
information.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator (if equipped)
When the vehicle turn signal is
activated, the lower portion of the
mirror housing will blink.
This feature provides an indicator to
the driver that the vehicle turn
signal is working properly.
62
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully
before driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
If equipped with powerfold mirrors,
you can fold the side mirrors using
the power mirror switch.
1. Rotate the switch to the
center/neutral position.
2. Momentarily pull the switch
rearward to auto fold in.
3. Momentarily pull the switch
rearward again to fold back to
design position.
The powerfold mirrors may be moved inward/outward manually, however,
if a mirror is moved manually, it will need to be reset. To reset: with the
switch in the center position, momentarily pull the switch rearward to
fold the mirrors in. An audible ЉclickЉ will be heard indicating
re-synchronization. If the click is not heard, use the switch to fold the
mirrors out, then in, until the click is heard. After that, the mirrors will
operate to their normal positions until they are again moved manually.
Note: Ten or more switch activations within 1 minute, or repeated
folding/unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during
the full travel may cause the system to disable the fold/unfold function to
protect motors from overheating. Should this occur, wait approximately 3
minutes for the system to reset and function to return to normal.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the bottom of the control to
adjust the pedals toward you.
• Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.
63
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
The adjustment allows for approximately 3 inches (76 mm) of maximum
travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET control and release
it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The indicator
light on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
64
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES/RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RES/RESUME
control will not work if the vehicle
speed is not faster than 30 mph (48
km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET control
to operate the Tap-Up function.
Press and release this control to
increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the CST (coast)
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the CST
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
65
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET control.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will
not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed, if RES/RESUME is then
selected, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control. This will erase your
vehicle’s previously set speed.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Audio control features
Press
to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, TAPE (if
equipped)
• CD (if equipped),
• FES/DVD (if equipped), or
• FES/AUX (if equipped).
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:
• Press SEEK to select preset stations or the next strong station within
the selected radio band.
In CD mode:
• Press SEEK to select the next selection on the CD.
66
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or − to adjust
volume.
Climate control features
Press TEMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
Press FAN + or - to adjust fan
speed.
MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children
unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
Note: The moon roof will open to the “comfort” position first before
opening all the way. The “comfort” position helps to alleviate rumbling
wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened.
67
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To open the moon roof: The moon
roof is equipped with a one-touch
open feature. Press and release
the
control. The moon roof
will open to the “comfort” position.
Press and release the control again
to fully open. To stop the one-touch
open feature press either the
ROOF
or
To close the moon roof: Press and
hold the control until the glass panel stops at the “comfort” position.
control again.
Press and hold the control again until the glass stops moving. When fully
closed, the rear portion of the glass panel will appear higher than the
front portion.
To vent the moon roof: Press and hold the
control. The moon
roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the
vent position. To close, press and hold the
control until the glass
panel stops moving.
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.
When closing the moon roof, you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.
HOMELINKா WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink Wireless Control System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
68
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink. It is
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat Step 1
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
69
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until Step 4 has
been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
Step 3 with procedures noted in the
“Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian
residents.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the indicator light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light
indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency
signals.)
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light. If the light is constant, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
begin with Step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat Step 1.
Note: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a continuous red, proceed with Steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
70
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace Step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note Step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 4 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLinkா Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
71
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Erasing HomeLinkா buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step
2 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink button, follow Step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status preceded
by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential
vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long
indicator chime. If equipped with an outside temperature display, it will
display in the instrument cluster all the time, except when a warning
message is present.
72
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer/Compass
• Trip odometer/Odometer/Compass
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Compass display
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
73
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
4
1
15
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
3. Start the engine.
14
13
4. From Info menu, select the
Compass/Odometer function. (Do
not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The
top of the message center must be
blank).
5
12
6
7 8 91011
5. Press and hold the SETUP and
RESET controls until the message
center display changes to show the
current zone setting (XX).
6. Press the RESET, then press
SETUP control repeatedly until the
correct zone setting for your
geographic location is displayed on
the message center. The range of
zone values are from 01 to 15 and “wraps” back to 01.
7. To exit the zone setting mode,
and to “lock in” your change, press
and release the RESET control.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED. It will take
up to five circles to complete calibration.
74
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu estimates approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under
normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF
when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for
one second when you have approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If
you RESET this warning message, this display and tone will return
within 10 minutes.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100
km.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
75
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolock
• Autolamp Delay
• Language
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for three seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. FUEL LEVEL
2. ENGINE TEMP
76
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
3. OIL PRESSURE
4. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
5. CHARGING SYSTEM
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
Autolocks
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolocks ON or OFF.
Autolamp delay
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolamp delay ON or OFF.
77
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control to set the language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories:
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
78
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Warning display
Door ajar
Status
Warning can be reset
Low fuel level
Warning returns after 10 minutes
Check charging system
Low brake fluid level
Low oil pressure
Check engine temperature
Reduced engine power
Stop engine safely
Check fuel cap
Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from OFF to ON.
Engine failsafe mode
DOOR AJAR. Displayed when a door is not completely closed.
CHECK ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine
coolant is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn
off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER. Displayed when the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
STOP ENGINE SAFELY. Displayed when the engine is overheating.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM. Displayed when the electrical system is
not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical accessories
when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes on
when the engine is operating at normal speeds, have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible.
79
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake fluid
reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
LOW OIL PRESSURE. Displayed when the engine oil pressure is low. If
this warning message is displayed, check the level of the engine oil.
Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
information about adding engine oil. If the oil level is OK and this
warning persists, shut down the engine immediately and contact your
authorized dealer for service.
CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel
filler cap under the Fuel Information section in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
ENGINE FAILSAFE MODE. Displayed when the engine has defaulted
to a ’limp-home’ operation. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
DATA ERR. These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle
network communication between electronic modules.
• Fuel computer
• Charging system
• Autolamp delay
• Auto locks
• Brake fluid
• Compass
• Outside temperature
• Engine sensor
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible if these messages
occur on a regular basis.
MINI MESSAGE CENTER ELECTRONIC COMPASS/TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
Outside air temperature
The outside temperature display is
contained in the instrument cluster
and displays all the time, except
when a warning message is present.
To turn the display off or change the display from English to Metric see
your authorized dealer.
80
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Compass
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas.
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also
affect compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
3 2
4
1
15
map.
14
13
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
3. Start the engine.
5
12
6
7 8 91011
4. Press the ODO reset button in
the cluster, hold for six seconds and
release. You will see that ZONE
appears in the instrument cluster
display.
5. Press and release the button until the desired zone number appears.
Note: The range of zone values are from 01 to 15 and “wraps” back to
01.
6. When you get to the desired ZONE number, hold the button down to
“lock in” the new value.
The cluster display will return to the “normal” mode when the button
has not been pressed for 6 seconds.
81
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.
2. To enter the compass calibration
mode, press and hold the button for
greater than eight seconds. The
display will then show CAL in the
display window.
3. Drive the vehicle slowly (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) in circles until
CAL indicator turns off. As many as 5 complete circles may be required.
4. The compass is now calibrated.
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to prevent
theft of the tailgate.
• Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
• Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.
TAILGATE REMOVAL
Your tailgate is removable to allow
more room for loading.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Use a screwdriver to pry the
spring clip (on each connector) past
the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
3. Disconnect the other cable.
4. Lift tailgate to a 45–degree angle
from horizontal.
82
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
5. Lift right side off of its hinge.
6. Lift tailgate to a 80–degree angle from horizontal.
7. Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend
the pickup box for longer loads.
To extend the bed extender:
1. Lower tailgate.
2. Pull the round knobs on each side
of the extender to release it from
the pickup box.
3. Pivot extender on to the tailgate.
4. Evenly push down on the
extender and push the round knobs
in on each side locking it in place.
Green markings on the shaft
indicate the locked position. The
locking clip screws below the middle
bar can be tightened
counterclockwise for extra security.
Note: If the red marking on the
shaft is visible, the bed extender
is not locked or properly secured.
To stow the bed extender, follow Steps 1 through 4 in reverse order.
The bed extender may be used to secure a load of up to 100 lb. (46 kg)
on the tailgate.
The bed extender should always be kept in the stowed position
with the tailgate closed when not in use.
When driving the vehicle off road, the bed extender should be in
the stowed position and the tailgate closed.
83
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To remove the bed extender:
1. Extend the bed extender.
2. Pull the round knobs on each side
of the extender to unlock it.
Make sure the locking clip screws
are loose before removing the
extender.
3. Press the locking clips below the
middle bar on each side and lift the
extender out of the bed.
Note: Remove and store the bed extender when not in use.
To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
84
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
Refer to the SecuriLock passive anti-theft system section in this
chapter for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
The power door lock controls are located on the driver and front
passenger door panels.
Press control to unlock all vehicle doors.
Press control to lock all vehicle
doors.
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature helps
prevent you from locking yourself
out of your vehicle.
With the key in any ignition
position:
• The driver’s door will
automatically unlock if it is locked
by the driver’s power lock control
while the driver’s door is open.
The vehicle may still be locked with
the key in the ignition, and performing one of the following actions:
• Pressing the manual lock button on the door.
• Operating the remote entry transmitter.
• Operating the keyless entry keypad.
• Operating the driver’s door with a key.
85
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Childproof door locks (if equipped)
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock.
• Move control down to disengage childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
86
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
doors.
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The parklamps will flash.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn
will chirp once, and the parklamps will flash once more.
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps and the parklamps will not flash.
Power door lock/unlock disable feature (if equipped)
The
(lock) and
(unlock) features on your power door locks will
not work from inside the vehicle when:
• the ignition has been turned to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, and
• 20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using
the remote entry transmitter, the keyless entry pad, or the power door
lock control (while the accompanying door is open).
87
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The
(lock) and
(unlock) features will work again after:
• a door has become ajar,
• the ignition is turned to the 3 (ON) position, or
• using the UNLOCK
control on your remote entry transmitter or
unlocking via the keyless entry keypad.
Deactivating/activating power door lock/unlock disable feature
All vehicle doors must be closed before beginning the procedure. You
must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds, or the procedure will have
to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait a
minimum of 30 seconds to begin again.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position, then press the
three times.
button
2. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, then press the
button three times.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position; the horn will chirp to
indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated.
4. Within five seconds, press the
control two times. Note: One horn
chirp should be heard, indicating the system has been disabled.
5. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to exit programming.
Note: After exiting the driver configuration mode, the horn will chirp
once to indicate a feature has been activated/deactivated.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to 2
(ACCESSORY) or 3 (ON) to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
Memory feature (if equipped)
The remote entry system can also control the memory feature.
Press the
control once to unlock the driver’s door. Pressing the
control will automatically move the seat and adjustable pedals to the
desired memory position (the memory position corresponds to the
transmitter being used).
88
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat and adjustable pedals to the positions you desire.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s seat.
SET
3. Within 5 five seconds, press one
control on the remote transmitter
and then press the 1 or 2 control on
the driver’s door panel to which you
would like to associate with Driver 1
or Driver 2 positions.
1
2
4. Repeat this procedure for another
remote transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door seat.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on
the driver’s door panel.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
89
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it
from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle:
• Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your authorized dealer for
programming, or
• Perform the programming procedure yourself.
Programming remote transmitters
It is necessary to have all (maximum of six — original and/or new) of
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. If
all remote entry transmitters are not present during the programming
procedure, the transmitters that are not present during programming will
no longer operate the vehicle.
90
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
To program the transmitters yourself:
• Unlock all doors using the power
door lock/unlock control. Insert a
key and turn the ignition from
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) to the 3 (ON)
position and cycle between 1
(OFF/LOCK) and 3 (ON) eight
times in rapid succession (within
10 seconds) with the eighth turn
ending in the 3 (ON) position.
The locks will cycle to confirm
3
2
4
1
that the programming mode has been entered.
• Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any
button on a transmitter. The locks will cycle once to confirm that the
remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.)
• Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters.
The locks will cycle once to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed.
• When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn
the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position or wait 20 seconds. Again
the doors will lock/unlock to confirm programming has been
completed.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm, or when the factory set
5-digit code or your personal code are correctly entered into the keyless
keypad.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 3 (ON) position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
91
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
last door is closed, even if the dimmer control is on.
Perimeter lighting feature (if equipped)
The perimeter lighting feature illuminates the exterior of the vehicle in
order to provide better visibility to the user while he or she approaches
and enters the vehicle.
The perimeter lighting feature activates when:
• the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position,
• the autolamp sensor determines that it is dark, and
• the user activates an unlock feature, using either the remote keyless
transmitter or the keypad.
The perimeter lighting feature will illuminate the headlamps and parking
lamps for 25 seconds, or until:
• the ignition is turned to any position other than the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position, or
• the user activates a lock feature, using either the remote keyless
transmitter or the keypad.
Enabling/disabling the perimeter lighting feature
Your vehicle comes with the perimeter lighting feature enabled. All
vehicle doors must be closed before beginning the procedure. You must
complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds, or the procedure will have to be
repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait a
minimum of 30 seconds to begin again.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position, then press the
three times.
control
2. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, then press the
control three times.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position; the horn will chirp to
indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated.
92
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
4. Within five seconds, press the
control two times. Note: One horn
chirp should be heard, indicating the system has been disabled.
Conversely, a horn chirp followed by a honk will indicate the system is
enabled. Pressing the power door
the feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON.
Every two consecutive presses of the control after successfully
control two times again will turn
entering the configuration mode will change the enable/disable condition
of the feature.
5. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to exit programming.
Note: After exiting the driver configuration mode, the horn will chirp
once to indicate a feature has been activated/deactivated.
Autolock (if equipped)
The autolock feature is available on automatic transmission vehicles with
power locking. This feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the brake pedal is released and the vehicle attains a speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 (ON)
position, and
• the brake pedal is released and the vehicle attains a speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock
There are four methods to enable/disable this feature: One is through
your authorized dealer, the second with a power door unlock/lock
sequence, the third with the keypad, and the fourth using the message
center (if equipped).
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, unlock all
doors using the power door lock/unlock control and ensure all vehicle
doors are closed.
93
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Power door unlock/lock procedure
You must complete Steps 1–5 within
30 seconds, or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the
procedure needs to be repeated,
you must wait a minimum of 30
seconds to begin again.
1. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON)
position, then press the
control three times.
2. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, then press the
control three times.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (ON) position; the horn will chirp to
indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated.
4. Within five seconds, press
then the
control. Note: One horn
chirp should be heard, indicating the system has been disabled.
Conversely, a horn chirp followed by a honk will indicate the system is
enabled. Pressing the
control then the
control will turn the
feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON. The
horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short
chirp and one long honk) if autolock was activated.
5. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to exit programming.
Note: After exiting the driver configuration mode, the horn will chirp
once to indicate a feature has been activated/deactivated.
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter 5–digit entry code
4. Press and hold the 7 • 8. While holding the 7 • 8 press the 3 • 4.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
6. Release the 7 • 8.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Message center procedure
For information regarding the activation and deactivation of the
autolocks feature using the message center, refer to Message center (if
equipped) in the Driver Controls chapter.
94
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock all vehicle doors.
• unlock only the driver’s door.
• unlock all vehicle doors.
• program/erase the customer keycode.
• enable/disable the autolocking feature.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is marked on
the computer module, and is available from your authorized dealer. You
can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed).
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. After the code is entered, the locks will cycle, confirming that the new
code has been set.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
• If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Press and release 1 • 2 then,
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 1.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
95
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Antiscan feature
The keyless entry keypad is equipped with an anti-theft function called
“antiscan.” The antiscan feature provides a one-minute lockout feature,
where the user is unable to enter the vehicle using the keypad; this
lockout occurs when a valid entry code has not been entered by the user
within 7 attempts (35 consecutive button presses). During the lockout,
the keypad will flash and pressing the controls on the keypad will be
ignored, except for pressing the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls
simultaneously, which will still lock the vehicle.
The antiscan feature will be turned off after:
• one minute, when the antiscan feature times out.
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• the
control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON)
position, or from the 3 (ON) position to the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. Note: The driver’s door will unlock and the interior lamps will
illuminate after the factory set 5-digit code or your personal code are
correctly entered.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
SECURILOCKி PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
96
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Note: The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
3
after switching the ignition to the 1
(OFF/LOCK) position.
2
4
1
97
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
3
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3
2
(ON) position (maintain ignition in
the 3 (ON) position for at least one
second, but no more than ten
seconds).
4
1
2. Turn ignition from the 3 (ON)
position back to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition.
98
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second
previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition
from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON) position (maintain
ignition in the 3 (ON) position for at least one second but no more than
ten seconds).
4. Turn the ignition from the 3 (ON) position back to the 1 (OFF/LOCK)
position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position to the 3 (ON) position
(maintain ignition in the 3 (ON) position for at least one second, but no
more than ten seconds). This step will program your new key to a coded
key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
99
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision.
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as
possible behind your head.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
100
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Push control to lower head restraint.
Front seat
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or rearward.
Make sure that the seat is
relatched into place.
• Pull the release lever handle
located on the side of the seat up
to move the seat back forward or
backward.
Using the armrest (if equipped)
Push the release control to move
the armrest up or down.
101
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the manual lumbar support
For more lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
front of vehicle.
For less lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
rear of vehicle.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the front or rear portion to tilt
the seat.
102
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Memory seats/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat and
adjustable pedals to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver’s seat.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat, and adjustable
pedals to the desired position.
Press the SET control. The SET
control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is
illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in
Park. A memory position may be programmed at any time.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats, do the following:
• Push control located on the
instrument panel to set at high
heat.
• Push control again to set at low heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.
The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes.
103
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the
event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the
head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close
to that position as possible.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down. Lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly or as
close as possible behind your head.
Push control to lower head restraint.
Folding up the rear seats (if equipped )
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into the seatback position.
104
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Pull control to release seat
cushion.
2. Rotate seat cushion up until it
locks into vertical storage position.
Returning the seat to seating position
Before returning the seatback to its original position, make sure
that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from
storage position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety Systemி
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors, and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.
105
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety Systemி work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors
provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a
crash, the RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either
none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags and
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
106
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and
they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to
reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are
properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the
front.
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag when the passenger
seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of the airbag(s) after
a collision.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter.
107
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front outboard safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to tighten the safety belts
firmly against the occupant’s body during a collision. This maximizes the
effectiveness of the safety belts and helps properly position the occupant
relative to the airbag to improve protection. The safety belt
pretensioners can be either activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the airbags.
Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors
The front safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be
pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in
response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load
on the occupant. Refer to Energy management retractors section in
this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety Systemி is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
108
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
109
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
110
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Center front safety belt (Regular Cab center seating position only)
Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the Regular Cab
center seating position.
If you carry large cargo behind the seat or items that might damage or
soil the belt, detach the belt from the seat:
1. Release the mini-buckle by
inserting a key or safety belt tongue
into the slot.
2. Insert the belt into the clip on the
back panel. Protect the stowed belt
if you carry cargo this may damage
or soil the belt.
111
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If the belt has been disconnected to carry large objects behind the seat,
reconnect it as follows:
1. Remove the belt from the
stowage clip on the back panel.
2. Buckle the small tongue on the
end of the belt into the mini-buckle
on the driver’s side. The belt is now
ready for use. This mini-buckle
should stay buckled at all times
unless cargo-carrying makes it
necessary to detach the belt.
Safety belt with cinch tongue (Regular Cab center only)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap/shoulder safety
belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and don’t allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt
having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
belt portion of it.
112
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
How to fasten the cinch tongue (Regular Cab center only)
1. Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and
chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women,
should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
While you are fastened in the seat belt, the combination lap/shoulder belt
with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake
hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 8 km/h (5 mph)
or more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your
forward movement.
113
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Energy management retractors
Your vehicle has a seat belt system equipped with energy management
retractors at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
An energy management retractor is a device which pays out webbing in a
controlled manner. This feature is designed to help further reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant.
Seat belt systems equipped with an energy management retractor must
be replaced if they were in use during a frontal collision which resulted
in deployment of the frontal airbags. Refer to the Safety belt
maintenance section in this chapter.
Vehicle sensitive mode
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
The front outboard safety belts can also be made to lock manually by
quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. Rear safety belts (if equipped) can
also be made to lock up by pulling quickly on the belt.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt, or
the Regular Cab center safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
• Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a front outboard passenger
in a Regular Cab/ SuperCab/ SuperCrew or any rear seating position of
a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The Regular Cab front center seatbelt has a
cinch mechanism. Refer to Safety belt with locking cinch tongue
(Regular Cab center only) earlier in this chapter. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seat whenever
possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for
Children later in this chapter.
114
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
• Right front passenger seat
• Rear seats (if equipped)
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
115
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all outboard
seating positions (except the driver position, which does not
have this feature) must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify
that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for
proper function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace
the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt buckle pretensioners at the
driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
Do NOT place objects between the seats, as this could interfere
with the functioning of the pretensioner.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions
with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt buckle
pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the lap and
shoulder belts during some collisions in such a way that they fit more
snugly against the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
116
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of
a collision.
Safety belt usage sensors
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckles are
equipped with sensors that detect if the safety belts are fastened. The
sensors provide information to the Personal Safety System which can
then adapt the airbag deployment or safety belt pretensioner activation
based upon safety belt usage.
The Personal Safety System provides the most benefit to belted
occupants. The system monitors and tailors the air bag
deployment based upon safety belt usage. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt will increase your risk of injury.
Front safety belt height adjustment (if equipped)
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the driver and right
front passenger. Adjust the height of
the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height
of the shoulder belt, push the
button and slide the height adjuster
up. Pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt
height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of
your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt and increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
117
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Lap belts
Adjusting the lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
The front center lap belt tongue is designed to fit only in the correct
buckle. The tongue will not securely latch if you attempt to use it in any
of the outboard seating position buckles. To ensure that you have used
the correct buckle you should hear a snap and feel it latch.
• Front center lap belt (SuperCab and SuperCrew)
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
118
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinderி
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The BeltMinder feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
BeltMinder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the BeltMinder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
BeltMinder feature.
119
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned
ON...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The driver’s or front
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The driver’s or front
The BeltMinder feature is activated -
passenger’s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light
unbuckled for approximately 1 illuminates and the warning chime
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph (5
km/h) and more than 1-2
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until the safety belts are
minutes have elapsed since the buckled.
ignition switch has been turned
to ON...
120
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given...
Consider...
“Crashes are rare events”
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far”
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable”
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light”
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
121
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
Consider...
“I have an airbag”
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely to
DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection,
WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the BeltMinder feature for that seating position, the BeltMinder is
disabled for the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder feature will
re-enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and
remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given
for the one time disable.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinderி feature
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
122
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state. (Step 3 must be
completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns
off.)
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3
seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch (20 cm)
safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number 611C22).
This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
123
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue
to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
1
1. Airbag cover
The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in
conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
124
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:
• driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the
inflators and airbags).
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and
diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off indicator light.
The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal
Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the
Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and
crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the
Personal Safety System section in this chapter.
Important SRS precautions
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should
always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag (SRS)
is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat if your vehicle has a back seat. Rear facing infant seats
should NEVER be placed in the front seats. This is because the back of
the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal
injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial.
125
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag cover.
Never place your arms or feet over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or
over the airbag cover (1).
Placing objects on or over the
airbag cover may cause those
objects to be thrown by the airbag
into your face and torso or may
result in a failure of the airbag to
inflate properly, both of which
could result in serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your authorized
dealer.
The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the
risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
126
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
Children and airbags
For additional important safety
information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat. Failure to
follow these instructions may
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular Cab, properly restrain the
child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving the
vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt protection for
all occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. A child or infant
restrained in the center front seat is not at risk of serious injury from the
airbags.
127
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag cover as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
128
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again
and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness lights will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness lights will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your authorized dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified
personnel.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s
frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s frontal airbag is not
part of the front passenger sensing system. The front passenger sensing
system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the front passenger’s frontal
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
129
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
•
a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.
• A smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints,
or a small adult occupies the front passenger seat.
Even with the front passenger sensing system, children 12 and
under should be properly restrained in the back seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the Љpassenger airbag offЉ or
Љpass airbag offЉ indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the
front passenger frontal airbag is off. When the front passenger seat is not
occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger frontal
airbag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.
The indicator light is located in the
center stack of the instrument panel
just above the radio. To confirm that
the indicator light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front
passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has
been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the
airbag is enabled (may inflate).
130
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
“passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator is lit, it could be that
the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s airbag. If
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should
be advised to ride in the back seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Sitting improperly out of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ light may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Pass Airbag Off
Objects
Passenger Airbag
Indicator Light
Unlit
Empty seat
Disabled
Disabled
Small (i.e. 3 ring binder, small
purse, bottled water)
Unlit
Medium (i.e. heavy briefcase,
fully packed luggage)
Lit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
Empty seat, Small or medium
object with safety belt buckled
131
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
In case there is a problem with the
passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit. Do
NOT attempt to repair or service
the system; take your vehicle immediately to the an authorized dealer.
The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
An out of position front center occupant could affect the
decision of the front passenger sensing system.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lb. [18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
132
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be
positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck,
the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to
the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 lb. (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder
belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
133
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
134
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
135
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the
safety seat, with the tongue
between the child seat and the
release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front seating position-Regular Cab)
(passenger side front and rear seating positions-SuperCrew and
SuperCab) (if equipped).
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 22
kg (48 pounds) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 27 kg (60 pounds) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 36 kg (80 pounds)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap.
Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and tether
anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors, refer to
Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For more
information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
136
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way
back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
If you are using a Regular Cab center seat, see Installing child safety
seats in cinch tongue combination lap and shoulder belt seating
position later in this chapter for instructions.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
137
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
138
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and
shoulder belt seating position (Regular Cab Center seating
position Only)
If you are using a regular cab center seat, see Center front safety belt
(Regular Cab center seating position only) earlier in this chapter for
instructions on attaching the mini-buckle.
The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder
belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt.
Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the Regular Cab
center seating position.
139
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in
the Regular Cab center front seat.
2. If the center lap/shoulder safety
belt has been disconnected from the
seat to carry large cargo behind the
seat, reconnect it by buckling the
small buckle on the end of the belt
into the mini-buckle on the driver’s
side.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If you must use
a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move seat all the
way back.
Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in front of an
active airbag.
3. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
140
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. While holding both shoulder and
lap portions next to the tongue,
route the tongue and webbing
through the child seat according to
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure that the belt
webbing is not twisted.
5. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle for that seating
positions until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely latched to the buckle by
pulling on the tongue.
6. While pushing down with your
knee on the child seat pull up on
the shoulder belt portion to tighten
the lap belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.
7. Allow the safety belt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to
securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle.
141
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
8. Before placing the child into the
child seat, forcibly pull the child
seat forward and back to make sure
that the seat is held securely in
place. To check this, grab the seat
at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
one inch of movement for proper
installation.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the
lap/shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt
tight during a collision.
Installing child safety seats in the front row lap belt seating
positions (SuperCab and SuperCrew)
Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap seating position
should be avoided if at all possible. The passenger sensing
system does not recognize child seats in the front center seating
position.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in the front center seating
position of a vehicle with rear seating positions.
1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its
bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the
tongue up the webbing.
2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating
position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue.
5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap
belt webbing to tighten the belt.
6. If you are installing a forward facing child seat, attach and tighten any
top tether strap.
142
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
7. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat
from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is
held securely in place. If the child seat moves excessively, repeat Steps 5
through 7, try a different child safety seat, or properly install the child
seat in a different position.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the
seatback or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the
seat cushion.
The rear seat in the SuperCab and SuperCrew has three straps along the
top of the seatback that function as both routing loops for the tether
straps and anchor loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
• F150 Regular Cab
143
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• F150 SuperCrew and SuperCab
Front seat tether strap attachment
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat and
under the head restraint.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
• You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seatback is locked in the upright position
before installing the child seat.
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Front seat Regular Cab passenger
side
144
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Front seat Regular Cab center
(located on back panel)
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
6. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
145
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Rear seat tether strap attachment
There are three loops of webbing
just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear
window) in the SuperCab and
SuperCrew. These loops are to be
used as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child
safety seat tether straps. For
example, the center loop can be
used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat
and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear
seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and through the loop
directly behind the child seat.
2. Route the tether strap behind the
head restraint supports to a loop
behind an adjacent seating position,
and hook the strap hook onto the
loop. If using the driver’s side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt
mounting for the center seat.
• Always put the tether strap
through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post will
hold the child seat tightly, but the head restraint post is not strong
enough to hold the child seat during a collision.
146
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Install the child safety seat tightly
using the LATCH anchors or safety
belts. Follow the instructions in this
chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat installation
at the following seating positions (LATCH is not available on F150
Regular cab) :
• F150 SuperCab and SuperCrew
The anchors on both sides of the center of the rear seat are provided for
child seats at the outboard seats, and are further apart than the pairs of
lower anchors for child seat installation at other seats. DO NOT install
child seats with LATCH attachments (rigid or mounted on belt webbing)
to the lower anchors at the center rear seat. If you install a child seat at
the center rear position, use the vehicle belt and the top tether anchor.
147
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the seat between the
cushion and seat back. The LATCH
anchors are below the locator
buttons on the seat back.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
148
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints
to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
149
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow
you to select different drive modes
as necessary. Information on
transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the
Driving chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
150
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
151
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
152
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
153
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs.
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of
a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
154
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ЉblowoutЉ,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
155
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the B pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size and
type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
156
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Important: Remember to replace the spare tire when you replace the
road tires on your vehicle. Even if it has never been used, the spare tire
should be replaced because tires degrade over time.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel air valves when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires.
Temporary Emergency Spare Tire Information
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary emergency spare tire.
This tire may be a T-type/mini-spare tire which will have the words
“Temporary Use Only” molded into the tire sidewall or it may be a full
size dissimilar spare tire/wheel that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tire, which will be identified with a “Caution”
label on the wheel. Both of these spare tires are considered “temporary”.
Replace these temporary emergency spare tires on the vehicle with a tire
of the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the other
road tires as soon as possible.
It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with a
temporary emergency spare tire. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not
operate above speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles
(80 km).
When driving with the temporary emergency spare tire do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Exceed 2000 miles (3200 km)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains
• Use more than one temporary emergency spare tire
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the temporary emergency spare tire
157
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Use of a temporary emergency spare tire at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Tool
Location
Spare tire
Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack, jack handle and lug nut
wrench
Regular Cab: Behind the interior
trim on the passenger side of the
cab
SuperCrew and SuperCab: Under
the rear seat on the passenger side
Removing the spare tire
1. Use the ignition key to remove
the lock cylinder from the access
hole of the bumper to allow access
to the guide tube. Assemble the jack
handle as shown in the illustration.
158
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
2. Fully insert the jack handle
through the bumper hole and into
the guide tube through the access
hole in the rear bumper.
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground,
the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack.
4. Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Refer to the instruction sheet (located with the jack) for detailed tire
change instructions.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
BRAKE
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)
and turn engine OFF.
159
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
4. Obtain the spare tire and jack
from their storage locations.
5. Use the tip of the lug wrench to
remove any wheel trim.
6. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
7. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground.
When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle
from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake
is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. If the vehicle slips
off the jack, someone could be seriously injured.
• Front
Note: Use the frame rail as the jacking location point, NOT the control
arm.
160
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Rear
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown (Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification):
• Six lug nut wheel
161
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Seven lug nut wheel
12. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire.
13. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
14. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
162
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
150
N•m
M14 x 2.0
200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
163
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
164
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
81 mph (130 km/h)
87 mph (140 km/h)
99 mph (159 km/h)
106 mph (171 km/h)
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
124 mph (200 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
168 mph (270 km/h)
186 mph (299 km/h)
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
165
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
166
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
167
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
168
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
“wear bars”, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread
wears down to the same height as
these “wear bars”, the tire is worn
out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any
of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
• Fabric showing through the tire
rubber
• Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
• Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
• Cracks in the tread groove
• Impact damage resulting from use
• Separation in the tread
• Separation in the sidewall
• Severe abrasion on the sidewall
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
169
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle
seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
170
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
171
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
172
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
173
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
174
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label axle weight
rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
175
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
176
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
177
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
(5 x 220) – (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (5
x 99 kg) — (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 — 495 — 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x
100) = 1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (12 x 45 kg) = 635 —
198 — 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. .
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (9
x 45 kg) = 635 — 198 — 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
178
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II, III or IV trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a heavy-duty trailer towing package,
the maximum weight your vehicle can tow is limited to 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg)
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully periodically during, and after any towing operation.
Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage
to your vehicle and personal injury.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
179
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Regular Cab 4x2 (126” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
4.2L (with
manual
3.31
3.55
3.55
3.73
7200 (3266)
8500 (3856)
10000 (4536)
10500 (4763)
2400 (1089)
3700 (1678)
5100 (2313)
5600 (2540)
transmission)
4.2L (with
automatic
transmission)
4.6L
3.55
3.73
3.31
3.55
3.73
11500 (5216)
12000 (5443)
12000 (5443)
13000 (5897)
13500 (6123)
6500 (2948)
7000 (3175)
6900 (3130)
7900 (3583)
8400 (3810)
4.6L
5.4L
5.4L
5.4L
Regular Cab 4x2 (145” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
4.2L (with
manual
3.31
3.55
3.55
3.73
7200 (3266)
8500 (3856)
10000 (4536)
10500 (4763)
2200 (998)
3500 (1588)
5000 (2268)
5500 (2495)
transmission)
4.2L (with
automatic
transmission)
4.6L
3.55
3.73
3.31
3.55
3.73
4.10
11700 (5307)
12200 (5534)
12500 (5670)
14000 (6350)
15000 (6804)
15300 (6940)
6600 (2994)
7100 (3221)
7300 (3311)
8800 (3992)
9800 (4445)
9900 (4491)
4.6L
5.4L
5.4L
5.4L
5.4L Heavy Duty
180
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Regular Cab 4x4 (126” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6200 (2812)
6700 (3039)
7600 (3447)
4.6L
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.55
11500 (5216)
12000 (5443)
13000 (5897)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.73
12500 (5670)
13500 (6123)
13000 (5897)
7100 (3221)
8100 (3674)
7600 (3447)
Regular Cab 4x4 (145” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6300 (2858)
6800 (3084)
8500 (3856)
4.6L
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.55
11700 (5307)
12200 (5534)
14000 (6350)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L Heavy Duty
3.55
3.73
3.73
4.10
13500 (6123)
15000 (6804)
14500 (6577)
15300 (6940)
8000 (3629)
9500 (4309)
9000 (4082)
9500 (4309)
181
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SuperCab 4x2 (133” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6300 (2858)
6800 (3084)
7600 (3447)
4.6L
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.55
11500 (5216)
12000 (5443)
13000 (5897)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.73
12500 (5670)
13500 (6123)
13000 (5897)
7100 (3220)
8100 (3674)
7600 (3447)
SuperCab 4x2 (145” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6400 (2903)
6900 (3130)
8600 (3901)
4.6L
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.55
11700 (5307)
12200 (5534)
14000 (6350)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.73
13500 (6123)
15000 (6804)
14500 (6577)
8100 (3674)
9500 (4309)
9000 (4082)
SuperCab 4x2 (163” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-kg (lb.)
Maximum
trailer
weight-kg (lb.)
5.4L Heavy Duty
4.10
15300 (6940)
9500 (4309)
182
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SuperCab 4x4 (133” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6000 (2722)
6500 (2948)
7300 (3311)
4.6L
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.55
11500 (5216)
12000 (5443)
13000 (5897)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.73
12500 (5670)
13500 (6123)
13000 (5897)
6800 (3084)
7800 (3538)
7300 (3311)
SuperCab 4x4 (145” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6100 (2767)
6600 (2994)
8300 (3765)
4.6L
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.55
11700 (5307)
12200 (5534)
14000 (6350)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.73
13500 (6123)
15000 (6804)
14500 (6577)
7800 (3538)
9300 (4218)
8800 (3992)
SuperCab 4x4 (163” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L Heavy Duty
4.10
15300 (6940)
9300 (4218)
183
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Crew Cab 4x2 (139” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6300 (2858)
6800 (3084)
8500 (3856)
4.6L
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.55
11700 (5307)
12200 (5534)
14000 (6350)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.73
13500 (6123)
15000 (6804)
14500 (6577)
8000 (3629)
9500 (4309)
9000 (4082)
Crew Cab 4x4 (139” wheelbase)
Engine
Rear axle ratio
Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
6500 (2948)
8200 (3719)
4.6L
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
3.73
3.55
12200 (5534)
14000 (6350)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
5.4L (with 17”
tires)
5.4L (with 18”
tires)
3.55
3.73
3.73
13500 (6123)
15000 (6804)
14500 (6577)
7700 (3493)
9200 (4173)
8700 (3946)
Trailer frontal area considerations:
• Not to exceed towing vehicle frontal area without Class IV trailer
towing package
• Not to exceed 60 square feet (5.52 square meters) with Class IV
trailer towing package
184
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Load equalizing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
1
the front bumper height is within ⁄2” (13 mm) of the reference point.
After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in
Step 2.
Note: Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is
higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load
equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
185
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a 5,000
lb. (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission in the Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance
Information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
186
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An
example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
4x4 vehicles equipped with manual-shift transfer case:
• Release the parking brake.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF position.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
187
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Place the transfer case lever in N (Neutral).
• Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) vehicle speed.
• The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) position overrides the transmission
and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission
gearshift lever position. The vehicle can move forward or
backward.
This position should only be used when towing the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
After reaching the destination, you must place your vehicle’s 4x4
gearshift lever in gear (2H, 4H or 4L).
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission and 4x4 vehicles
equipped with an electronic-shift transfer case:
• Release the parking brake.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF position.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).
• Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the front (4x4 only) and rear
driveshafts. Ford recommends the driveshafts be removed/installed only
by a qualified technician at an authorized dealer. See your authorized
dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the
driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case
components.
188
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. OFF/LOCK, locks the steering
wheel, automatic transmission
gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
Note: The ignition key cannot be
removed from the ignition unless
the gearshift lever is securely
latched in P (Park).
2. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running.
3. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
189
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. If the vehicle is operated in a
heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions, the engine air induction
may become partially clogged with snow and/or ice. If this occurs the
engine may experience a significant reduction in power output. At the
earliest opportunity, clear all snow and/or ice away from the air induction
inlet. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the
higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
190
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
BRAKE
If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Push the clutch pedal to the floor
191
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
3. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
192
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the
light may not illuminate.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the key,
rotate the steering wheel until the
key turns freely.
2. Turn the key to 4 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
193
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press and hold the accelerator to the floor and try again;
this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the
engine is flooded with fuel.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake system warning light.
194
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Base instrument cluster with
and without tachometer
!
BRAKE
Mid and Luxury instrument
cluster
!
P
BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled, normal braking is still effective. (If your
BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released, have
your brake system serviced immediately.)
195
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Base instrument cluster with
and without tachometer
!
BRAKE
Mid and Luxury instrument
cluster
!
P
BRAKE
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), press
the parking brake pedal down until
the pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated
until the parking brake is released.
Base instrument cluster with
and without tachometer
!
BRAKE
Mid and Luxury instrument
cluster
!
P
BRAKE
To release, pull the lever (2).
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
196
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
STEERING
To prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump reservoir
fluid level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
197
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock - column-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a park/brake-shift interlock feature that
prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the
ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a fuse
has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer
to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK, then remove
the key.
2. Locate the round access plug on
the underside of the steering
column cover.
198
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
3. Remove the access plug using a flat head screwdriver, then push the
override button using a flat head screwdriver, apply the brake pedal and
shift the transmission into N (Neutral).
4. Reinstall the access plug cover, start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position
and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Brake-shift interlock - floor-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed, it is possible that a fuse
has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer
to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to LOCK, then remove the
key.
199
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
2. Open the center console bin.
Using a screwdriver, carefully pry off
the console finish panel surrounding
the shifter mechanism by inserting a
screwdriver into the latch slot as
shown.
3. Remove console finish panel
assembly to expose the inside of the
gearshift.
4. Press and hold the white button
located along side the shifter
housing assembly (as shown in the
illustration). Press the gearshift
lever release on the shifter knob and
move the gearshift lever back to N
(Neutral) (two places rearward from
P [Park]).
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
200
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
Your vehicle’s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift
strategy that insures maximum heater performance during cold weather
operation.
When ambient temperature is 23°F (–5°C) or below and the engine
coolant temperature is below 100°F (38°C), light throttle upshifts may be
slightly delayed. Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 160°F
(71°C) the normal shift strategy will resume. This is normal operation
and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission.
If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine
coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature,
or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function
normally, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
• Release the parking brake.
201
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
P
R
D
/
O
N
D
R N D 2 1
P
2
1
Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch
on the end of the gearshift lever (column-shift transmission) or on the
gearshift bezel (floor-shift transmission).
• Column-shift transmission
202
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Floor-shift transmission
The transmission control indicator
(TCIL) will illuminate on the
instrument cluster.
O/D
OFF
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to D (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the D
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
203
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
1
2
3
4
5
R
Using the clutch
The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
3. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal and release the parking
brake.
204
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
4. Move the gearshift lever to 1st gear, then slowly release the clutch
pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased
shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or damage the
transmission. Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t
interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch
pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These
actions will reduce the life of the clutch.
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift and downshift according to the following charts for your specific
engine/drivetrain combination:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel
economy)
Shift from:
Transfer case position (if equipped)
2H or 4H
4L
1 - 2
2 - 3
3 - 4
4
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
45 mph (72 km/h)
9 mph (14 km/h)
12 mph (19 km/h)
15 mph (24 km/h)
18 mph (29 km/h)
D
-
(Overdrive)
Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
Transfer case position (if equipped)
2H or 4H
4L
1 - 2
2 - 3
3 - 4
4
11 mph (18 km/h)
21 mph (34 km/h)
31 mph (50 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)
5 mph (8 km/h)
11 mph (18 km/h)
14 mph (23 km/h)
17 mph (27 km/h)
D
-
(Overdrive)
205
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Maximum downshift speeds1
Shift from:
Transfer case position (if equipped)
2H or 4H
4L
D
55 mph (89 km/h)
21 mph (34 km/h)
(Overdrive) -
4
4 - 3
3 - 2
2 - 1
45 mph (72 km/h)
35 mph (56 km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h)
17 mph (27 km/h)
13 mph (21 km/h)
7 mph (11 km/h)
1Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces.
Reverse
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into
R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
• The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly
and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake
fully.
206
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Removing the key
Turn the ignition off, push the
release lever (located above the
ignition), then turn the key toward
you and remove the key.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in
reverse and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
207
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to 6
feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS may have reduced
performance or an increased chance
of false detection if the tailgate is
not locked and in the upright position. If the tailgate is down, the RSS
tone may be heard intermittently or continuously. The tone may also be
heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gearshift lever is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
An RSS control allows the driver to
turn the RSS on and off. To turn the
RSS off, the ignition must be ON,
and the gear selector in R
(Reverse). An indicator light on the
control will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator
light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failure
in the RSS. The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is
pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
208
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not
engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer
to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper operation.
System indicator lights
• 4X4 HI - Momentarily illuminates
4x4 HI
when the engine is started.
Illuminates when 4H is selected.
• 4X4 LOW – Momentarily
4x4
illuminates when the engine is
started. Illuminates when 4L is
selected.
LOW
Using a manual 4WD system (if equipped)
2H
4H
N
4L
2H (2WD High) – Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high
speeds.
4H (4WD High) – Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.
209
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
N (Neutral) – No power to either front or rear wheels.
4L (4WD Low)– Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low)
will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from
4L (4WD Low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (2WD high) and 4H (4WD high)
• Move the transfer case lever between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD
High) at a stop or any forward speed up to 55 mph (88 km/h).
Note: Do not perform this operation at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h)
if the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the
transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, depress the clutch.
4. Move the transfer case lever through N (Neutral) directly to the
desired position.
• If the transfer case will not engage into 4L (4WD Low), drive the
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h), then repeat Steps 1 through 4.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: For proper operation in 4WD Low, ensure the transfer case shift
lever is moved entirely rearward in to the 4L (4WD Low) position and
that the 4x4 Low light is illuminated.
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case N (Neutral) position overrides the transmission
and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift
lever position. The vehicle can move forward or backward.
This position should only be used when towing the vehicle.
210
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)
2H (2WD High) - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high
speeds.
4H (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.
4L (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low)
will not engage while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be
no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) for
proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High)
• Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at any forward speed up to
55 mph (88 km/h).
Note: Do not perform this operation at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h)
if the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop
2. Depress the brake
211
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the
transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, depress the clutch.
4. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
• If shifting into 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete.
• If shifting out of 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
•
Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
212
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
213
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
214
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your authorized dealer.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows
you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case
operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving
chapter. Information on transfer
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
215
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
216
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
217
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS).
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
218
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may
stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent
tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and
cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
SNOWPLOWING
For F–150 snowplow applications, Ford recommends the F–150 4x4
Regular Cab and SuperCab equipped with the 5.4L engine, Heavy Duty
Payload Package and Snow Plow Prep Package. F–150 SuperCrew is not
available, or recommended, for snowplowing.
Installing the snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can
be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, Snowplow
section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation
affects the following:
• Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection
and air bag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an ЉAlterer’s
LabelЉ on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the
installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is shown on the lower
right side of the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. This is the weight
of permanently-attached auxiliary equipment, such as snowplow
frame-mounting hardware, that can be added to the vehicle and satisfy
Ford compliance certification to FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may
require the auxiliary equipment installer additional safety certification
responsibility. The Front Accessory Reserve Capacity (FARC) is added
for customer convenience
219
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for
proper braking and steering.
• Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop
Manual.
• Headlight aim may require re-adjustment.
• The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on
the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation
pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire
sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow
installation
Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached
Ford recommends that the F–150 be limited to low speed, personal-use
snow removal. Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has
been driven at least 500 miles (800 km).
The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may
cause the engine to run at a higher temperature:
• If you are driving more than 15 miles (24 km) where outside air
temperatures are above freezing, then angle the plow blade to full left
or right to maximize airflow to the radiator.
• If you are driving less than 15 miles (24 km) at speeds up to 40 mph
(64 km/h) in cold weather you will not need to adjust blade position
Snowplowing with your air bag equipped vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in
certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the air bag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
220
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Never remove or defeat the “tripping mechanisms” designed into the
snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as
possible air bag deployment.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your Ford
or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Transmission operation while plowing
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) when plowing in small areas at
speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) when plowing larger areas or
light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
• If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or
the engine can overheat.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at operating
temperature. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute. The
transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may
overheat.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Engine temperature while plowing
When driving with a plow, your engine may run at a higher temperature
than normal because the attached snowplow blade will restrict airflow to
the radiator.
If you are driving more than 15 miles (24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
If you are driving less than 15 miles (24 km) at speeds up to 40 mph
(64 km/h) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about blade
position to provide maximum airflow.
221
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or
36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12
month period)
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer, or
your selling authorized dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest authorized dealer (one tow per disablement). Even
non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
222
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your authorized dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
223
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
This switch is located in the front
passenger’s footwell, behind the kick
panel access cover, to the left of the
fuse box. The access cover needs to
be removed to reset the fuel pump
shut-off switch.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
224
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
maxi
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
fuses
2A
3A
4A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5A
—
—
—
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Brown
Red
Brown
Red
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
Brown
Black
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel. Remove the trim panel and fuse box cover to access the fuses.
To remove the fuse box cover, place
a finger behind the PULL tab and
your thumb above the PULL tab as
shown in the illustration, then pull
the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.
225
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A*
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Run/Accessory - Wipers, Instrument
cluster, Audio for XL/STX
Stop/Turn lamps, Brake on/off switch
Power mirrors, Memory seats and
pedals
2
3
20A*
5A*
4
5
10A*
7.5A*
DVD battery power, Power fold mirror
Keep alive memory for Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) and climate
control module
6
15A*
Parklamps, BSM, Instrument panel
illumination
7
8
9
5A*
10A*
—
Radio (start signal)
Heated mirrors, Switch indicator
Not used
226
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
10
Fuse Amp
Rating
20A*
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Trailer tow back-up lamps relay
(PCB1), Trailer tow parklamp relay
(R201)
11
12
13
10A*
—
10A*
A/C clutch, 4x4 solenoid
Not used
Climate control module power,
Flasher relay
14
10A*
Back-up lamp and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) relay coil, A/C pressure
switch, Redundant speed control
switch, Heated PCV (5.4L), Trailer
tow back-up lamps relay coil, ABS,
Reverse park aid, EC mirror
Overdrive cancel, Cluster
Brake-shift interlock solenoid
Fog lamp relay (R202)
Run/Start feed - Overhead power
point, Electrochromatic mirror,
Heated seats, BSM, Compass, RSS
(Reverse Sensing System)
Restraints (Air bag module)
Battery feed for overhead power point
Cluster keep alive power
15
16
17
18
5A*
10A*
15A*
10A*
19
20
21
22
10A*
10A*
15A*
10A*
Delayed accessory power for audio,
power door lock switch and moonroof
switch illumination
23
24
10A*
15A*
RH low beam headlamp
Battery saver power for demand
lamps
25
26
10A*
20A*
LH low beam headlamp
Horn relay (PCB3), Horn power
227
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
27
Fuse Amp
Rating
5A*
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Passenger Air bag Deactivation (PAD)
warning lamp, Cluster air bag warning
lamp, Cluster RUN /START power
SecuriLock transceiver (PATS)
PCM 4x4 power
28
29
30
31
32
5A*
15A*
15A*
20A*
15A*
PCM 4x4 power
Radio power
Vapor Management Valve (VMV), A/C
clutch relay, Canister vent, Heated
Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO) sensors
#11 and #21, CMCV, Mass Air Flow
(MAF) sensor, VCT, Heated Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve
(4.2L engine), CID sensor (4.2L
engine)
33
34
15A*
20A*
Shift solenoid, CMS #12 and #22,
4.6L/4.2L EGR
Fuel injectors and PCM power, Intake
Manifold Runner Control (4.2L
engine)
35
20A*
Instrument cluster high beam
indicator, High beam headlamps
Trailer tow right turn/stop lamps
Rear power point
36
37
38
39
40
41
10A*
20A*
25A*
20A*
20A*
20A*
Subwoofer power
Instrument panel power point
Low beam headlamps, DRL
Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector
power
42
101
102
10A*
30A**
20A**
Trailer tow left turn/stop lamps
Starter solenoid
Ignition switch feed
228
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
103
Fuse Amp
Rating
20A**
—
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
ABS valves
104
Not used
105
106
107
108
109
110
30A**
30A**
30A**
30A**
30A**
—
Electric trailer brakes
Trailer tow battery charge
Power door locks (BSM)
Passenger power seat
Driver power seat, Adjustable pedals
Not used
111
112
113
114
30A**
40A**
30A**
40A**
—
4x4 relays
ABS pump power
Wipers and washer pump
Heated backlite, Heated mirror power
Not used
115
116
117
30A**
—
Blower motor
Not used
118
30A**
Heated seats
401
30A Circuit Power windows, Moonroof, Power
breaker sliding backlite
R01
R02
R03
R04
R05
Full ISO relay Starter solenoid
Full ISO relay Accessory delay
Full ISO relay Hi-beam headlamps
Full ISO relay Heated backlite
Full ISO relay Trailer tow battery charge
Full ISO relay Blower motor
Half ISO relay Trailer tow park lamps
Half ISO relay Fog lamps
R06
R201
R202
R203
Half ISO relay PCM
* Mini fuses ** Cartridge fuses
229
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Auxiliary relay box
The relay box is located in the engine compartment on the left fender.
• With Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) and 4x4 options
• Without Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) and 4x4 options
The relays are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp
Description
Location
Rating
F03
5A
Clockspring illumination
R01
Full ISO 4x4 CCW
Relay
R02
R03
Full ISO 4x4 CW
Relay
1
⁄
2
ISO
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) high beam
Relay
Relay
Relay
Diode
disable
DRL
A/C clutch
A/C clutch
R201
R202
D01
230
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
231
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the jumper cables
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
232
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
233
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
234
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
235
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do
not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
236
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty
repairs. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673 (FORD).
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized
dealer could provide, after following the steps described above, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
237
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized
dealer is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
238
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of
a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
239
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-authorized dealership
• sales disputes between customer and authorized dealer except those
associated with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s
performance as designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
240
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
• An authorized dealer representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from authorized dealer management, recognized for their business
leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your authorized dealer and a Ford Motor Company representative will
then be asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
•
The name of the authorized dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the authorized dealer(s) and
Ford Motor Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
authorized dealer(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
241
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the authorized
dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies
available to them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your authorized dealer or write/call
the Board at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
242
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative
to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement
have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to
eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized Canadian
dealer. There are several plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving
needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and
rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 4,600 participating authorized Canadian dealers.
243
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your authorized dealer for
complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or
visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, write
or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
244
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service
Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, or Ford
Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
245
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
WAXING
Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six
months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
246
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your
vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s
door jamb) to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
•
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
247
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• 4.2L engine
• 4.6L engine
248
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• 5.4L engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Windshield
Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A), available from your authorized dealer.
This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which
helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and
windshield from automated car wash facilities.
249
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines (if
equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth; you may also use Motorcraft Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
250
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH SUPERCREW)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
For King Ranch F-150 SuperCrew leather seats, refer to separate
section in this chapter.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F-150 SUPERCREW
ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather. Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading
of the material.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
251
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
First use a dry cloth then wipe with a damp cloth. Allow the area to dry,
then apply conditioner.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather. For more specific cleaning
information, contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1–800–282–KING
(5464).
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
Scratches
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the Web site at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking
delivery of your vehicle. Condition twice yearly in order to replenish
lost oils and revitalize the aroma, suppleness and resilience of the
leather.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
252
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Car Wash (Canada only) (CXC-21)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (U.S. only) (ZC-40-A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S. only) (ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate (ZC-6-A)
Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (U.S. only) (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32–A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (U.S. only) (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
253
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide scheduled maintenance information which makes
tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services
are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
254
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N
(Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located on the front bumper under the grill.
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open.
255
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.2L V6 engine
1
2
4
5
3
6
10
9
7
8
1. Battery
2. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
3. Power steering fluid reservoir
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Engine coolant reservoir
6. Air filter assembly
7. Engine oil filler cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
256
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4.6L V8
1. Battery
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Air filter assembly
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
257
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
5.4L V8
1. Battery
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
3. Air filter assembly
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
258
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to
Lubricant specifications in this
chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).
259
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
• 4.2L V6 engine
MIN
MAX
• 4.6L/5.4L V8 engine
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
260
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between
the MIN and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil
level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• 4.2L V6 engine
• 4.6L/5.4L V8 engine
• If the oil level is below the lower
hole or the MIN mark, add
enough oil to raise the level
within the lower and upper holes
or within the MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
261
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
262
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
information for the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
263
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is also electronically controlled by a
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
264
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or within the “COLD
FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
265
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
266
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA, OR and NM),
VC-7–B (CA, OR and NM), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51–A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the “FULL COLD” or
“COLD FILL RANGE” level. Follow these steps to add engine coolant.
267
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “FULL COLD” or the “COLD FILL RANGE” level on
the reservoir.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Turn cap until click is
heard/felt to ensure it is tightly installed.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking engine coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system. Your
cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
268
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
269
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The mini message center (if
equipped) will indicate “Check
Gauges”, refer to Warning Lights
and Chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
• The message center (if equipped) will indicate a system warning, refer
to Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter.
• The Service engine soon indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
270
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
271
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
272
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Refueling
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
273
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
If the Digital Display reads “CHECK
FUEL CAP” and stays on after you
start the engine, the fuel filler cap
may not be properly installed. Turn
off the engine, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
274
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium” unleaded
gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use “Regular”
unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more
pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized dealer.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
275
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
• Your Service engine soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon indicator, refer to the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
276
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading may result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than three automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
277
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
278
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed
(if equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
279
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the Service engine soon light, charging system warning
light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system
is not working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells,
leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to
intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working.
Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This
decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
280
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause your
Examples are:
indicator to illuminate.
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the
indicator should turn off—A driving cycle consists of a
cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
If the
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Service engine soon light is on,
refer to the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with
the Service engine soon light on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
281
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled
maintenance information for the
service interval schedules. If adding
fluid is necessary, use only
MERCON ATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir.
282
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of your
brake system could be
compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Check the fluid level. Refer to scheduled maintenance information for
the service interval schedules.
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step
in the reservoir.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specification
ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
283
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and water
from entering the reservoir.
2. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
3. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and
cap onto reservoir.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
284
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30
km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
285
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
286
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Fluid level should be at bottom of
the opening.
4. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid level
is at the bottom of the opening.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
287
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Transfer case fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for maintenance
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.
288
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
• 4.2L/4.6L engines
1. Loosen the clamp that secures
the air filter element in place.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the open end of the air filter
housing.
4. Install a new air filter element.
5. Reassemble the two halves of the air filter housing, aligning the notch
and slot found on the top of each half. Secure the clamp, making sure
not to crimp the air filter edges between the two halves of the air filter
housing. This could cause filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter
the engine if not properly seated.
289
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 5.4L Engine
1. Release two retainer clamps.
2. Pull air filter tray assembly out
toward front of vehicle and lift air
filter element up and out of housing.
The air filter box needs to be free of any debris before installing a new
air filter.
3. Install a new air filter element
into the tray assembly.
4. Return air filter tray to original
position by pressing firmly on the
handle until all rearward movement
stops and secure the two clamps.
290
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
4.2L V6 engine 4.6L V8 engine 5.4L V8
engine
Air filter element FA-1632
FA-1632
FA-1754
Battery
BTX-65-650
FG-986-B
BTX-65-650
FG-986-B
FL-820-S
BTX-65-650
FG-986-B
FL-820-S
Fuel Filter
Oil Filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs
FL-400-S
1
2
1The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
2For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
291
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid
Ford Part
Name
Application
Capacity
Brake fluid and Motorcraft
All
Fill to line or step
(for clutch) on
reservoir
clutch fluid
High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Engine
Motorcraft
4.2L V6 engine
4.6L V8 engine
5.4L V8 engine
17.6 quarts
(16.7L)
20.7 quarts
(19.6L)
21.2 quarts
(20.0L)
coolant1
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
Engine oil
Motorcraft SAE 4.2L engine
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
(includes filter 5W-20
change)8
Premium
Synthetic
Blend Motor
Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
N/A
4.6L engine
5.4L engine
Reg. Cab 6.5’
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
7.0 quarts (6.6L)
26.0 gallons
Fuel tank
box/SuperCab 5.5’ (98.4L)
box
SuperCrew
30 gallons
(113.6L)
Reg. Cab 8’
27 gallons
box/SuperCab 6.5’ (102.1L)
box/SuperCab 8’ Standard
box
35.7 gallons
(135.1L) Optional
292
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Fluid
Ford Part
Name
Application
Capacity
Power steering Motorcraft
All
Fill to between
MIN and MAX
fluid
MERCON ATF
lines on reservoir
Transfer case
fluid
Transmission
fluid3
Motorcraft
MERCON ATF
Motorcraft
MERCON ATF
Motorcraft
MERCONV
ATF
4x4 vehicles
2.0 quarts (1.9L)2
5–speed manual
3.75 quarts (3.5L)
Automatic
4R70/75 E
13.9 quarts
(13.2L)4
Front axle
Rear axle5
Motorcraft SAE 4x4 vehicles
75W-90 Fuel
Efficient High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE 8.8/9.75 inch axle 5.5 pints (2.6L)6
3.7 pints (2.0L)
75W-140
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft
Premium
10.25 inch axle
All
6.9 pints (3.3L)7
4.25 quarts (4.0L)
Windshield
washer fluid
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
1Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
2Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transfer case to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
3Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval.
293
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON V type fluid.
MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable.
DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
4Approximate dry fill capacity including transmission fluid cooling
system, actual refill capacities will vary based on vehicle application and
transmission fluid cooling system (i.e. coolers size, cooling lines, auxiliary
cooler capacities). The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level
should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
5Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and
is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants do not need to be
checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the
axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should
be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.
6Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to 1/4-9/16 inch
(6-14 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level
surface.
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL–3 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A, for complete fill of 8.8 inch
and 9.75 inch Traction-Lok axles.
7Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to the bottom of
the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
For 10.25 inch Traction-Lok axles, use 6.5 pints (3.1L) of Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant and 8 oz. (236 ml) of Additive
Friction Modifier XL–3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification
EST-M2C118-A.
8Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
294
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Ford part
name or
equivalent
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
Item
Motorcraft SAE XY-80W-90-QL
80W-90
Premium Rear
WSP-M2C197–A
Front axle
(4X4)
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192–A
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Rear axle
1
Axle Lube
Motorcraft High PM-1
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
ESA-M6C25-A
Brake fluid and
clutch fluid
Engine coolant
Motorcraft
VC-7–A (except WSS-
Premium Gold
CA, OR and
M97B51-A1
Engine Coolant NM), VC-7-B
(yellow-colored) ( CA, OR and
NM)
Motorcraft SAE XO-5W20-QSP
5W-20 Premium (US)
WSS-M2C930-A
and API
Synthetic Blend CXO-5W20–LSP12 Certification
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
Multi-Purpose
Grease
(Canada)
Mark
Engine oil
XG-4 or XL-5
ESB-M1C93-B
Seat tracks
295
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Ford part
Ford part
Ford
specification
Item
name or
number
equivalent
Hinges, latches, Motorcraft
XG-3-A
ESE-M1C171–A
striker plates,
fuel filler door
Silicone Brake
Caliper Grease
hinge and door and Dielectric
check arm
Compound
Motorcraft
XL-1
none
Lock cylinders
Penetrating and
Lock Lubricant
Transmission
Premium
XG-1-C
ESA-M1C75-B
/steering/parking Long-Life Grease
brake linkages
and pivots,
brake and clutch
pedal shaft (if
equipped)
Power steering Motorcraft
XT-2-QDX
MERCON
fluid, transfer
case fluid (4X4)
and manual
transmission
fluid
MERCON ATF
Automatic
transmission
(4R70/75 E)
Motorcraft
MERCONV
ATF
Motorcraft
Premium
XT-5-QM
ZC-32–A
MERCONV
2
WSB-M8B16–A2
Windshield
washer fluid
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
1Use Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok axles.
2Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the
296
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information to
determine the correct service interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON V type fluid.
MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable.
DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
ENGINE DATA
Engine
4.2L V6 engine 4.6L V8 engine 5.4L V8 engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
256
87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
281
330
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
Ignition system EDIS
0.052–0.056 inch 0.052–0.056 inch 0.040–0.050 inch
(1.32–1.42mm) (1.32–1.42mm) (1.02–1.28mm)1
Spark plug gap
Compression
ratio
9.3:1
9.37:1
9.85:1
1The 5.4L 3V spark plug gap CAN NOT be adjusted.
297
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Regular Cab
Vehicle
dimensions
Styleside 6.5’
box - inches
(mm)
Flareside 6.5’
box - inches
(mm)
Styleside 8.0’
box - inches
(mm)
(1) Overall
length
211.2 (5364)
211.2 (5364)
229.8 (5837)
(2) Overall width 78.9 (2005)
(3) Overall 73.7 (1872) /
height – 4x2/4x4 75.6 (1921)
78.9 (2005)
73.8 (1875) /
75.6 (1921)
126.0 (3198) /
126.0 (3198)
67.0 (1701)
78.9 (2005)
73.8 (1875) /
75.6 (1921)
144.5 (3671) /
144.5 (3671)
67.0 (1701)
(4) Wheelbase – 126.0 (3198) /
4x2/4x4
(5) Track -
Front
126.0 (3198)
67.0 (1701)
(5) Track - Rear 67.0 (1701)
67.0 (1701)
67.0 (1701)
298
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
SuperCab
Vehicle
dimensions
Styleside 5.5’
box - inches
(mm)
Styleside /
Flareside 6.5’ box - inches
box - inches
(mm)
Styleside 8.0’
(mm)
(1) Overall
length
(2) Overall
width
217.8 (5532)
78.9 (2005)
229.8 (5837)
248.4 (6309)
78.9 (2005)
78.9 (2005)
(3) Overall
height –
4x2/4x4
74.1 (1881) /
76.5 (1943)
73.5 (1866) /
75.6 (1919)
73.4 (1865) /
75.4 (1916)
(4) Wheelbase 132.5 (3366) /
144.5 (3671) /
144.5 (3671)
67.0 (1701)
163.1 (4143) /
163.1 (4143)
67.0 (1701)
– 4x2/4x4
(5) Track -
Front
132.5 (3366)
67.0 (1701)
(5) Track -
Rear
67.0 (1701)
67.0 (1701)
67.0 (1701)
299
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Super Crew
Vehicle dimensions
(1) Overall length
(2) Overall width
Styleside 5.5’ box - inches (mm)
223.8 (5685)
78.9 (2005)
73.5 (1867) /
76.0 (1931)
(3) Overall height – 4x2/4x4
300
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Super Crew
Vehicle dimensions
(4) Wheelbase – 4x2/4x4
Styleside 5.5’ box - inches (mm)
138.5 (3518) /
138.5 (3518)
(5) Track - Front
(5) Track - Rear
67.0 (1701)
67.0 (1701)
301
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure by the
trailing edge of the driver’s door or
the edge of the driver’s door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
302
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block and transmission.
Transmission/Transaxle code designations
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label . The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Code
Description
A
B
M
Four-speed automatic (4R70E)
Four-speed automatic (4R75E)
Five-speed manual (M5R2)
303
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer.
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you
the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Ford Accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the authorized dealer are covered for the
full length of your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your authorized
dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessory products. Not
all accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your
authorized dealer or visit our online store at:
www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Exterior trim
Fender flares
Front end covers
Grille inserts
Headlamps, taillamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Running boards
Sliding rear windows - manual and power
304
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Splash guards
Step bars
Tonneau covers
Truck caps
Wheels
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Leather wrapped steering wheels
Scuff plates
Speed control
Lifestyle
Bedliners and bedmats
Bed tents
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
Rear seat entertainment systems
Toolboxes
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
First aid and highway safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Navigation systems
Mobile-ease hands free communication system
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
305
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
306
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
C
B
307
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Clock adjust
D
Clutch
E
308
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
G
F
H
309
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
I
J
M
K
L
O
310
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
P
R
S
311
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
T
V
W
312
2005 F-150 (f12)
Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
